Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ﻣﺆﻟﻒ:
ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺍﺑﻮ ﻋﺎﺻﻢ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ
ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻔﺘّﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ
ﻣﺘﺮﺟﻢ:
ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺤﻤﺪﻱ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 2
ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﻛﺮﻡ)ﺹ( ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
»ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻨّﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻐﻦّ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ«
»ﺁﻧﻜﺲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ«
»ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ«
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
..........................
................................
8 ................................ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺎپ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ
..................
................................
10 ................................................................ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ
.......................
1514
................................................................................................ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
................................
........
١۶ ................................................................ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
16
................................
........... ................................................................ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
16
................................
.......... ................................................................ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
...................
................................
17 ................................................................ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
...........................
................................
19 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
.....................
................................
24 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(1
................................
.....
26 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
................................
...............
29 ................................ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ
.....................
................................
31 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(2
................................
............
33 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﻮﻡ :ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
33
.....................
................................................................ ﺍﻟﻒ :ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ
34
................................
.......... ................................................................ ﺍﻭﻻ :ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ
36
................................
.......... ................................................................ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً :ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ
................................
.......
37 ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺠﻨﺲ ﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ
.....................
................................
39 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(3
................................
.........
42 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ :ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
42
.........................
................................ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ :ﻗﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻔﺎ
5 ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ
42
................................
............ ................................................................ ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎً :ﻗﻠﺐ
42
................................
........... ................................................................ ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎً :ﺍﺧْﻔََﺎ
..................
................................
46 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ): (4
................................
...........
48 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ :ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
48 ................................................................
................................
..... ﺏ :ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ
50
......................
................................................................ ﺝ :ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪﺩﺍﺭ
.....................
................................
52 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(5
................................
...........
54 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﺸﻢ :ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
54
.................
................................................................................................ ﺩ » :ﺭﺍ«
56
..................
................................................................................................ ﻫ :ﻻﻡ
.....................
................................
58 ................................................................ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(6
60 ﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ :ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ) ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ)62.................................................................................................................. (7
................................
65. ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ :ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ) ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ(
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ)67......................................................................................................................(8
................................
73. ................................................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻬﻢ :ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ
83
................................
......... ................................................................ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﻗﻒ
.........................
................................
87 ................................ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻳﺎﺯﺩﻫﻢ :ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ
................................
90
.... ................................................................ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
................................
.........
93 ................................................................ ﺁﺩﺍﺏ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
................................
.........
97 ................................ ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻗﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ
...........................
................................
99 ................................................................ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ100........................................................................................................................
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 6
ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ101......................................................................................................................................
7 ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 8
ﺍﻟﺮﲪﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ
ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﹼ
ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ،ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺧﻴﺮ ،ﺳﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺯ
ﻛﺘﺎﺏ» ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ« ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻋﻼﻗﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ،ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻢ؛ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ» ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ«ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﻟـﻒ
ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﭼﺎپ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻥ ﺷـﺎءﺍﷲ ﺑـﺎ ﻫﻤﻜـﺎﺭﻱ
ﺍﻫﻞ ﺧﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻋﻼﻗﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎپ ﻫﺎﻱ
ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻭ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘـﺮﺟﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ
ﻗﻼّﺏ ] [...ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ،ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻳﺎﺑﻌﻀـﻲ ﺣـﺎﻻﺕ
ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺗـﺎ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺻـﻞ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ
ﺁﻣﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺤﻤﺪﺍﷲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ،ﻋﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻓﺮﺍﻣـﻮﺵ
ﺷﺪﺓ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺣﻴﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺎﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓـﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ـ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ
ﻧﺎﻡ ـ ﺗﺸﻜّﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻢ.
ﻭﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺪﻧﺎ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻟﻪ ﺃﻟﻄﺎﻫﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺻﺤﺎﺑﺘﻪ ﺃﺟﻤﻌﻴﻦ
"ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺤﻤﺪﻱ"
ﺷﻌﺒﺎﻥ 1407ﻫ.ﻕ
ﻫﺮﻧﮓ )ﺑﺴﺘﻚ(
ﻓﺮﻭﺭﺩﻳﻦ 1366ﻫ.ﻕ
ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ
ﻋﻠﻢ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ،
ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺗﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﺰﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ـ
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻔﺎﻫﺎً ـ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ،ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ
ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﺍﻝ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻣﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺍﺯ
ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ)ﻉ( ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ)ﻉ( ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻋﺰّﻭﺟﻞ .ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﺰﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻲ
ﮔﻮﻳﺪ :
1
F0 ﻭ ﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻨﺎ ﻭ ﺻﻼ« »ﻷﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻻ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻧﺰﻻ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ »ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ« ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻋـﺮﺏ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻔﻆ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻬﺠﻪ ،ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻗﺒﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ؛ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺼـﻴﺢ ﺗـﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫـﺎ؛
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻟﻐﺖ ﻭ ﻟﻬﺠﻪ ﻗﺮﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﺢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦﺷﺎﻥ ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﻛﺮﻡ)ﺹ( ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷـﺪ
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﺪ :
ﺁﺛﻢ« ﺃﻟﻘﺮﺍﻥ ﻳﺠﻮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻮﻳﺪ »ﻭﺃﻻﺧﺬ
»ﻻﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ...ﺍﻟﺦ«
ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮔﻨﺎﻫﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
11 ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﻭ ﻣــﺎ ﺑــﺎ »ﺗﺠﻮﻳــﺪ« ﻗــﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑــﻪ ﺑﻬﺘــﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻬﺠــﻪ ﻣــﻲﺧــﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ،ﺯﻳــﺮﺍ ﺗــﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻬﺠــﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔــﻆ
ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﭽـﻮﻥ :ﺃﺑـﻲ ﺑـﻦ ﻛﻌـﺐ ،ﻋﺒـﺪﺍﷲ ﺑـﻦ
ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ،ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺎﺑﻪ ،ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻡ ،ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ
ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ،ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻮﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻜﻲ ﺑﻦ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﻴﺴـﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻮﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳـﻢ
ﺑﻦ ﻓﻴﺮّﻩ ﺷﺎﻃﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻮﺍﻟﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺟﺰﺭﻱ ﺷـﺎﻓﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺁﻧـﺎﻥ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ .ﺍﻳﺸـﺎﻥ
ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﺍﻥ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﻭﺗﺎ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻫﻤـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘـﺎﺏ
ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﻮﺕ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ،ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺣﻔـﺺ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﺻـﻢ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻗـﺮﺍءﺕ ﺍﻛﺜـﺮ ﺍﻫـﻞ ﺍﺳـﻼﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ؛ ﻭ
ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺫﻳﻞ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧـﺪﻣﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ
ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ :
» -1ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ :ﺁﺳﺎﻥ« ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ.
1
F1 » -2ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ« ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺣﻔْﺺ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﺻﻢ ﺑﻦ ﺍﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎﻥ.
» -3ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ« ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ
ﺣﻔﺺ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺣﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮ
ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺘﻪﺍﻡ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻘﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻏﺐ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ
ﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ؛ ﻧﺎﻓﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ.
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 12
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ »ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ« ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻢ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ -ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺧﻼﻝ ﻭ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭﻱ -ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺣﻤـﺖ ﻭ
ﻣﺸﻘﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ،ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ،ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ
ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ
ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ،ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻧﺪ؛ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ،ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ :ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ،ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ،ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺪ ﻣﺘّﺼﻞ ،ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ
ﺍﺫﻫﺎﻥﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ،ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ،
ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ؛ ﻭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻦ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﻭﺕ ﺫﻫﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ؛
ﺃﻟﻐﻠﻤﺎﻥ« ﺷﻴﺦ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﺰُﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » :ﺗﺤﻔﺔ ﺃﻻﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭ
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻮﻡ.
ﺃﻻﻃﻔﺎﻝ« ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﻇﻢ ،ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ »ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻻﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﺤﻔﺔ
ﺃﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻝ« ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺄﺧّﺮﻳﻦ :ﺷﻴﺦ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻨﻴﺎﻥ :ﺷﻴﺦ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻣﻴﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ »ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻟﻤﻠﻚ
ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﺿﺒﺎﻉ ،ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ.
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ،ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ
ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺵ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻟﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ.
***
ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺠﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻢ؛ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ :
ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ،ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺫﻭﻕ
ﻭ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻟﻐﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻭ
13 ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﺢ ،ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ
ﺭﺍ ـ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻔﻆ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ـ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻅ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻑ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻓﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻅ ﻧﺮﻡ
ﻭ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﻮﺕ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
»ﺯﻳﻨﻮﺍ ﺁﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺗﻜﻢ« » 1ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻨّﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻐﻦّ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ« : 2
F3 F2
ﻣﺪﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮِّﺭﻩ
ﻳﻜﻢ ﺟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻝ 1392ﻫﺠﺮﻱ ﻗﻤﺮﻱ
ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺑﻦ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ
_________________________________________________________________________
» -1ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﻨﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪ« ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻨﻦ ﺍﺑﻮﺩﺍﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺎﺟﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻣﻲ.
» -2ﻛﺴﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ «.ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ.
» -3ﻭ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺯﺑﻮﺭ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻳﻨﺖ ﺍﺩﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ«.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 14
ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
»ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ)ﻉ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻓﺮﻭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ«.
ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻪﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﺮﻳﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺪﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ :
)ﻣﺰّﻣﻞ (20 /
ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺛﻮﺍﺏ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ :
2
»ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺃ ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﻨﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻟﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺸﺮ ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎ«.
F6
ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻣﺬﻱ
ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﺯ
ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻧﺪ .ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ :
_________________________________________________________________________
» -1ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ«.
» -2ﻛﺴﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ،ﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 16
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭﻧﺪ؛
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
»ﺃﻫﻞ ﺃﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﺃﻫﻞ ﺍﷲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺘﻪ« 3ﺳﻨﻦ ﻧﺴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻦ ﻣﺎﺟﻪ.
F9
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ »ﺍﻫﻞ ﺍﷲ« :ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ،ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ
ﺷﻔﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ.ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ :
»ﺃﻗﺮﺅﻭﺍ ﺃﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻧّﻪ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﺔ ﺷﻔﻴﻌﺎً ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻪ« .4ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ.
F10
_________________________________________________________________________
» -1ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦﺗﺎﻥ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻣﻮﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﻫﺪ«.
» -2ﻣﺎﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺗﺒﺎﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻜﻮﻛﺎﺭ )ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺧﺪﺍ( ﺍﺳﺖ«.
» -3ﺍﻫﻞ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ«.
» -4ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ«.
17 ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ :ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺩﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺷﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ
ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺬَﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺧﺒﺮ
ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻛﺮﺩﺍﺭﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺩﻭﺯﺥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺷﻌﻠﻪﻭﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎ
ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻛﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ
ﻣﻲﮔﺰﻳﻨﻨﺪ ،ﻭﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﺏ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ،ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﺪ :
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻭ ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻧﺸﺎﻥ ـ
ﺭﺿﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ ـ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﺪ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺑﺮ ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؛ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ
ﻗﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻨّﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺠﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ
ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻣﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﺴﺎﺯﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻣﻞ ،ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻲ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 18
ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ،ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺻﺪﺍﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻠّﻒ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻲﺟﺎ
ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻓﺎﺳﻘﺎﻥ ،ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ.
ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ :
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺭ .ﻙ .ﺑﻪ ﺹ .14
ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ
ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
»ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ« ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻖ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻟﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ،ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ
ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻲ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﻤﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ،ﻫﺮﺟﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ
ﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻣﺜﻼً :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺑﺎ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﻲ؛ ﺑﮕﻮ :ﺃﺏ .ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻟﺐ ـ ﺩﺭ
ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ـ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ،ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺑﺎ« ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ
ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺟﻴﻢ« ﺑﮕﻮ :ﺃﺝ .ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ
ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺟﻴﻢ« ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ »ﻏﻴﻦ« .ﻣﺜﻼً :ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ :ﺃﻍ .ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻠﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻠﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ...
ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ،ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪ؛ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :
-1ﺟﻮﻑ
ﺟﻮﻑ ،ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻪ
ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺩ] .ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ
) (1ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ[.
ﺍﻳﻦ ،ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺳﻪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ
ﻛﺮﺩ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ
ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ] .ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ[.
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ :
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 20
-2ﺣﻠﻖ
ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻖ ،ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
ﻫﻤـﺰﻩ -ﺍﺯ ﺗَﻪ ﺣﻠﻖ ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَء ،ﺃَء(؛ )ﺃَ ْﻫ ،ﺃَﻩ.)
-ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺣﻠﻖ ،ﻋﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻉ ،ﺃَﻉ(؛ )ﺃَﺡ ،ﺃَﺡ.(
-ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻠﻖ ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ،ﻏﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻍْ ،ﺃَﻍْ(،
ﺃَﺥْ(. )ﺃَﺥْ،
21 ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
-3ﺯﺑﺎﻥ
ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺠﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
-ﺍﺯ ﺗﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻠﻖ ،ﻗﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ) :ﺃَﻕْ ،ﺃﻕْ(.
-ﺍﺯ ﺗﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﻑ ،ﻛﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻙ ،ﺃَﻙ.(
-ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ؛ ﺟﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
)ﺃَﺝ ،ﺃَﺝ) ،(ﺃَﺵ ،ﺃَﺵ) ،(ﺃَﻱ ،ﺃَﻱ.(
-ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ )ﻳﺎ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ( ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻦ )ﺗﻪ( ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ،
ﻃﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻁْ ،ﺃَﻁْ() ،ﺃَﺩ ،ﺃَﺩ) ،(ﺃَﺕ ،ﺃَﺕ.(
-ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ )ﺁﺧﺮ( ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﻇﺎ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻝ ﻭ
ﺛﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
) -ﺃَﻅْ ،ﺃَﻅْ() ،ﺃَﺫْ ،ﺃَﺫْ() ،ﺃَﺙْ ،ﺃَﺙْ(.
ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺟـــﻪ :ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ
ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
-ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻦِ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻥْ،
ﺃَﻥْ(.
-ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻦِ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ» ،ﺭﺍ«
ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ) :ﺃَﺭ ،ﺃَﺭ.(
ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ 1ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ،ﺻﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺍ ﻭ
F12
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ )ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻨﺎﻳﺎ = ﺑﻦ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ( ﺑﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﺮﺟﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 22
-ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ )ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻱ( ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺿﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
]ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺩﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ :
- 1ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ.
- 2ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﭼﭗ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ.
- 3ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ.
ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ
ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ) :ﺃَﺽ ،ﺃَﺽ[.(
-ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻠﻮ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺿﺎﺩ ،ﻻﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ
ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ،ﺩﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺶ ﻭ
ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ() :ﺃَﻝْ ،ﺃَﻝْ(.
-4ﻟَﺐ
ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺩﻭ ﻟﺐ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
-ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻟﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ )ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ( ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻢ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻆ
ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﺏ ،ﺃَﺏ(؛ )ﺃَﻡ ،ﺃَﻡ.(
ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻭ ،ﺃَﻭ.(
-ﺍﺯ ﻟﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ »ﻓﺎ« ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﻑ،
1
ﺃَﻑ.(
F13
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ؛ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :
ء ،ﺏ ،ﺕ ،ﺙ ،ﺝ ،ﺡ ،ﺥ ،ﺩ ،ﺫ ،ﺭ ،ﺯ ،ﺱ ،ﺷﻒ ﺹ ،ﺽ ،ﻁ ،ﻅ ،ﻉ ،ﻍ ،ﻑ ،ﻕ ،ﻙ ،ﺕ ،ﻡ ،ﻥ ،ﻫ ،ﻭ ،ﻱ ،ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ
ﺳﻪ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ؛ »ﺍﻟﻒ« :ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ» ،ﻭﺍﻭ« :ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺿﻤﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ،ﻭ »ﻳﺎ« ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ.
23 ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 24
(1) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ-1]
ﻛﺠﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ؟، ﺭﺍ، ﻧﻮﻥ، ﻣﻴﻢ، ﻻﻡ، ﺍﻟﻒ، ﻗﺎﻑ، ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ-ﺃ
ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟-ﺏ
. ﺗﻪ ﺣﻠﻖ، ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻟﺐ، ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ،ﻭﺳﻂ ﺣﻠﻖ
ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺿﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ؟
ً ﺁﻳﺎ-ﺝ
[ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ »ﻭﺍﻭ« ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ »ﺁﻥ« ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟-ﺩ
ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ-2
:ﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺟ،ﺑﺎﺩﻗّﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ
25 ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 26
ﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ
ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ
ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ :
ﺷﺪﱠﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺧَﺎﻭﺕ
ﺷﺪﺕ :ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺒﺲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ]ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ،ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ
ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ[ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ :
)ﺃَﺝ) (ﺃَﺩ) (ﺃَﻕْ( )ﺃَﻁْ( )ﺃَﺏ) (ﺃَﻙ) (ﺃَﺕ(
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
)ﺃَﺟِﺪ ﻗَﻂْ ﺑﻜَﺖ(
ﺭﺧﺎﻭﺕ :ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ) :ﺃَﺱ) (ﺃَﻝْ( )ﺃَﻡ) (ﺃَﺙْ(
)ﺃَﻅْ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺪﺕ(.
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔَﺎﻝ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼ:ﻳﻌﻨﻲ،ﭘﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ .ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻝ ]ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺁﻥ[؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ) :ﺃَﺥْ( )ﺃَﺹ) (ﺃَﺽ) (ﺃَﻉ) (ﺃَﻁْ(؛ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﭘﺮ
ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ )ﺃَﺡ) (ﺃَﺩ) (ﺃَﺱ) (ﺃَﻝْ( )ﺃَﻙ (ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻝ؛ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﺪ.
27 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺧُﺺ ﺿَﻐْﻆ ﻗﻆْ( ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺖ.
ﺗَﻔَﺸﱢّﻲ
ﺗﻔﺸّﻲ ،ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ) :ﺃَﺵ (ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ
ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﭼﺴﺒﺪ.
ﺗَﻜْﺮﺍَﺭ
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ »ﺭﺍ« ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﺭﺍ« ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
)ﺃَﺭ) (ﺃَﺭ(
ﺻﻔﻴﺮ
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ)ﺃَﺹ) (ﺃَﺱ) (ﺃَﺯ (ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺯﺍ،ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ
ﺳﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ].ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ[ﻭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ »ﻫﻤﺲ« ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ﻗَﻠْﻘَﻠﻪ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻘﻠﻪ :ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ)ﺃَﻕْ(
)ﺃَﻁْ( )ﺃَﺏ) (ﺃَﺝ) (ﺃَﺩ (ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ)ﻳﻘْﺘُﻠُﻮﻥَ( )ﻣﺤﻴﻂْ( )ﻣﺂﺏ) (ﺃﻟْﺨُﺮُﻭﺝ) (ﺷَﺪﻳﺪ(؛ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺻﺪﺍ
)ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺒﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 28
ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ،ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ .ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻗﻠﻘﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ
ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ) :ﻗُﻄْﺐ ﺟﺪ(.
ﻏُﻨّﻪ
ﻏُﻨّﻪ :ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ـ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ـ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻏﻨّﻪ ﺧﻴﺸﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ) :ﺃَﻥَ( )ﺃَﻣﺎ(.
ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻨﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﺖ :
-1ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ 1ﺩﺭ »ﻳﺎ« ﻭ »ﻧﻮﻥ« ﻭ »ﻣﻴﻢ« ﻭ »ﻭﺍﻭ«.
F14
-2ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﭘﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ )ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ،ﺹ :
.(51-50
-3ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ »ﺑﺎ«.
-4ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻢ.
2
F15 ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ )ـّ( ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻢ.
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ،ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ :
-1ﻓﺘﺤﻪ :ﺯِﺑﺮ )ـَ( -2 .ﻛﺴﺮﻩ :ﺯﻳﺮ )ـِ(.
-4ﺳﻜﻮﻥ )ـْ(. -3ﺿﻤﻪ :ﭘﻴﺶ )ـُ(.
ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ
ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ) :ـًـٍـٌ( .ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ )ﻥْ ﻧـّ ،ﻡ
ﻣـْ( .ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ )ـّ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ.
-2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
29 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺫﺍﻝ ،ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥٍ -ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺯﺍ ،ﻧﻮﻙ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺫﺍﻝ
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺍ ،ﻧَﻪ .ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ :
)ﺃَﺫْ( )ﺃَﺯ) (ﻳﺬْﺭﺅُﻛُﻢ) (ﺗَﺰْﺭﻋﻮﻧَﻪ) (ﺃَﻟﱠﺬﻳﻦَ( )ﺯﻋﻤﺘُﻢ.(
ﻭ ﺯﺍ ،ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ،ﺹ (33ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﺃَﺯ(
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﻫﻤﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺒﺲ
ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ) :ﻓَﺤﺜﱠﻪ ﺷَﺨْﺺ ﺳﻜَﺖ.(
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 30
ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺁﻥ ،ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ
ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲﭼﺴﺒﺪ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ
ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ) :ﺃَﺷْﻴﺎء( )ﺃَﺷْﻴﺎء( .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﻢ ،ﺻﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ،
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺣﺒﺲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ :
)ﺃَﺝ) (ﺃَﺟﺮَﻣﻮﺍ(.
-1ﺟﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺒﺲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺟﻬﺮ ﺿﺪ ﻫﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺁﻥ،ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﻤﺲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
31 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
(2) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ( ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ2) ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ-1]
ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ؟-ﺃ
. ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ، ﺣﺮﻭﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺧﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ-ﺏ
، ﺭ، ﻕ، ﻍ، ﻁ، ﺹ، ﺥ، ﺡ، ﺕ: ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ، ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺩﺭﺱ-ﺝ
.ﻥ
: ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ،( ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ2) ( ﻭ1) ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎﻱ-ﺩ
[.« »ﻕ« ﻭ »ﻍ،« »ء« ﻭ »ﻉ،« »ﻁ« ﻭ »ﺕ،«»ﺯ« ﻭ »ﺱ
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ-2
:ﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻮﺟ،ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺩﻗّﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﺘﻦ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 32
ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﻳﺪ ) :ﻣﻦْ ،ﺇِﻥْ ،ﻟَﻦْ( ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ) :ﻋﻨْـﺪ ،ﺃﻷَْﻧْﺒـﺎء،
ﺃﻷَْﻧْﺒِﻴﺎء (ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ ) :ﻛُﻨْﺘُﻢ ،ﻳﻨْﺄَﻭﻥَ ،ﺃﻧْﺘَﻈﺮُﻭﺍ(.
ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ،ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺯﺍﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳـﻢ
ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ) :ﻋﺰِﻳﺰٌ ،ﻏَﻔُﻮﺭ ،ﺃَﺣﺪ ،ﺃَﺯﻭﺍﺟﺎ ،ﻏَﺎﺳﻖٍ .(...
ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ :
-1ﺍﻇْﻬﺎﺭ -2ﺍﺩﻏَﺎﻡ -3ﻗَﻠْﺐ -4ﺍﺧْﻔﺎ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 34
ﺍﻭﻻً :ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ،ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻏﻨّﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺩﺭﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﻲﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﺩ :
ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ،ﻫﺎ ،ﻋﻴﻦ ،ﺣﺎ ،ﻏﻴﻦ ،ﺧﺎ.
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً :ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ،ﻓﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ
ﻧﻮﻥ ،ﺍﺻﻼً ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ )ـّ( ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﺸﮕﺎﻧﻪ )ﻳﺮْﻣﻠُﻮﻥَ(
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ :ﻳﺎ ،ﺭﺍ ،ﻣﻴﻢ ،ﻻﻡ ،ﻭﺍﻭ ،ﻧﻮﻥ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ :
-ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻨّﻪ؛ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ :ﻳﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻭ ،ﻣﻴﻢ ،ﻧﻮﻥ.
-ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻨّﻪ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ :ﻻﻡ ،ﺭﺍ.
ﻣﺜﻼّ :
)ﻣﻦْ ﻳﻌﻤﻞْ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﻣﻴﻌﻤﻞْ(.
)ﻣﻦْ ﻭﻟَﺪ (ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﻣﻮﻟَﺪ.(
)ﻭﺃَﻥْ ﻟَﻮ (ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﻭﺃَﻟﱠﻮ.(
)ﺧَﻴﺮﺍًﻳﺮَﻩ (ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﺧَﻴﺮَﻳﺮَﻩ.(
)ﻗَﻮﻝٌ ﻣﻌﺮُﻭﻑ (ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﻗَﻮﻟُﻤَﻌﺮُﻭﻑ.(
ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :
ﺃ -ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ
ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻟَﺪ ﺧَﻴﺮٌ ﻭ ﺃَﺑﻘَﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻳﻮﻣﺌُِﺬ ﺧَﻴﺮﺍً ﻳﺮَﻩ
ﻳﻮﻣﺌﺬ ﻧﱠﺎﻋﻤﺔٌ ﺻﺤﻔﺎً ﻣﻄَﻬﺮَﺓً ﻗَﻮﻝً ﻣﻌﺮُﻭﻑ ﻛُﻼ ﻧُﻤﺪ
***
ﻋﻴﺸَﺔٍ ﺭﺍﺿﻴﺔٍ ﻏَﻔُﻮﺭ ﺭﺣﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺰَﺓٍ ﻟُﻤﺰَﺓٍ َﻣﺎﻻً ﻟُﺒﺪﺍً
ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺭءﺍﻩ ﺃﺳﺘﻐﻨﻲ ]ﻋﻦ ﺭﺑﻬﻢ[ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﻬﻢ
(3) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ-1]
ﻓﺮﻕ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟-ﺃ
. ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ-ﺏ
. ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ-ﺝ
. ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻨّﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ-ﺩ
ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ؟-ﻫ
: ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ، ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ-ﻭ
،ﻮﺍ ﺇِﺫْﻇَﻠَﻤ،ﻬِﻢﻠَﻴﺍﻏْﻠُﻆْ ﻋ ﻭ،ﺮًﺍﺎ ﺧَﻴﺍﺟﻭ ﺃَﺯ،ﺍﻟَﻜَﻢﻭﺪ ﻋ،ْ ﺃَﻥْ ﻟَﻦ،ﻴﻢ ﺃَﻟﺬَﺍﺏ ﻋ، ﺗَﺄْﺗﻴِﻬِﻢﻛَﺎﻧَﺖ
[.ِﺬَﺍﺏﻦْ ﻋ ﻣ،َﺧَﻞﺪ ﺃَﻥْ ﻳ،ﻠُﻮﻡﻌﻖﱞ ﻣﺣ
ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ، ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ-2
: ﺧﻂ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 40
41 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺩﺭﺱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ
ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎً :ﻗﻠﺐ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﺐ ،ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ
ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻨّﻪ ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺰﺩ » ﺑﺎ « ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ؛ﻣﺜﻼً :
ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﻣﻤﺒﺨﻞَ(. )ﻣﻦْ ﺑﺨﻞَ(
)ﺳﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺼﻴﺮٌ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ) :ﺳﻤﻴﻌﻤﺒﺼﻴﺮٌ(.
ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺎً :ﺍﺧْﻔََﺎ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧْﻔﺎ ،ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ
ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻏُﻨﱠﻪ.
43 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻦ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ،ﻗﺮﺍﺭ
ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ،ﭘﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ:
1
ﺩﻡ ﻃَﻴﺒﺎ ﺯِﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗُﻘًﻲ ﺿَﻊ ﻇَﺎﻟﻤﺎ
F18 ﺻﻒ ﺫَﺍﺛَﻨَﺎ ﻛَﻢ ﺟﺎﺩ ﺷَﺨْﺺ ﻗَﺪﺳﻤﺎ
(4) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ-1]
ﻗﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ؟-ﺃ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ؟، ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻠﺐ-ﺏ
. ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ-ﺝ
[. ﺍﻟﺦ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﺴﭙﺎﺭﻳﺪ... ﺫَﺍﺛَﻨَﺎﻒ ﺑﻴﺖ » ﺻ-ﺩ
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻠﺐ ﻭ، ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ-2
. ﺧﻂ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ،ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ؛ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
47 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ
ﺏ :ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ
ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ،ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ
)ﺃَﻡ (ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺃَﻣﺮًﺍ( )ﺃَﻣﻨًﺎ( )ﻫﻢ (ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻳﻤﺸُﻮﻥَ( )ﺃَﻣﻠﻲ(
)ﻳﻤﺤﻖُ( )ﻳﻤﺢ ﺃﷲُ(.
ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻳﻤﺸُﻮﻥَ( )ﺃَﻣﺮًﺍ( ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻫﻢ(
)ﺃَﻧْﺘُﻢ.(
ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ :
-1ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ -2ﺍﺧﻔﺎ -3ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ
49 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻭﻻً :ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ
ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺃَﻡ ﻣﻦْ( )ﻭﻣﻨْﻬﻢ ﻣﻦْ( )ﻛَﻢ ﻣﻦْ( )ﻟَﻬﻢ
ﻣﻐْﻔﺮَﺓٌ(.
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً :ﺍﺧﻔﺎ
ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ » ﺑﺎ« ﺍﺧﻔﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
)ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺭِﺯﻭﻥَ( )ﻛَﻠْﺒﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﻂٌ( )ﺇِﻥﱠ ﺭﺑﻬﻢ ﺑِﻬِﻢ.(
ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎً :ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ
ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺪﺩ )ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪﺩﺍﺭ( ،ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ
ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﺇِﻥﱠ( )ﺛُﻢ (ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻣﻨﺎ( )ﺃَﻟﻨﱠﺎﺱِ( )ﻫﻤﺎﺯٍ( ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ
(5) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ-1]
. ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ، ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ-ﺃ
ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ؟-ﺏ
،ﻄَﻲﻦْ ﺃَﻋﺎ ﻣ ﻓَﺄَﻣ،ﺎ ﺇِﻧﱠﻤ،ٌﻦﺆْﻣ ﻣﻨْﻜُﻢ ﻣ ﻭ،ﻨَﺖﻴ ﺑِﺎﻟْﺒﻢﻠُﻬﺳ ﺭ،ﻮﺍﺘُﻮﺑ ﻳ ﻟَﻢ،ﻠَﻲ ﻋﻢﻫﻭ
.َﻮﺍ ﺃَﻟﺬﱢﻛْﺮﻌﻤﺎ ﺳ ﻟَﻤ،ﺭ ﻓَﺄَﻧْﺬ،ْﻦ ﻣﻢ ﻫ،ﻃَﻠﱠﻘَﻜُﻦﱠ
ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟، ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻏﻨّﻪ-ﺝ
[.ﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﺪ-ﺩ
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ، ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ-2
:ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
53 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺩ » :ﺭﺍ«
»ﺭﺍ« ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ :
-1ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻪ )ﺭ (ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ )ﺭ (ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ )ﺭِ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
-2ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻪ )ُ...ﺭ (ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ )َ...ﺭ (ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ )ِ...ﺭ(
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ 1ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺁﻥ ،ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ
F19
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
2
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ،ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ؛ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ
F20
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ »ﺭﺍ«ﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ؛ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ :
»ﺭﺏ ﺃﺭﺟِﻌﻮﻥِ«» ،ﺛُﻢ ﺃﺭﺟِﻊ» «ﻟَﻜُﻢ ﺃﺭﺟِﻌﻮﺍ«.
-2ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ،ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍ ﭘﺮ
ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ.
55 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ» ،ﺭﺍ« ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ،ﭼﻪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ؛ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ
ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻭ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﺮﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ 1ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ »ﻳﺎ«ﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ،ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛
F21
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ:
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ،ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ »ﺍﻟﻤﺮْﺻﺎﺩ« .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 56
ﻫ :ﻻﻡ
ﻻﻡ ،ﺩﺭ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺟﻼﻟﻪ ﻱ)ﺃَﷲُ( )ﺃَﻟﻠﱠﻬﻢ (ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ
ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ :
ﺍﻣﺎ ﻻﻡ »ﺃﻝ« ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺟﻼﻟﻪ ـ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ :
-1ﻗﺴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺃﻟﺸﱠﻤﺲ ،ﺃﻟﻨﱠﺎﺱ ،ﺃَﻟﻄﱠﺂﻣﺔُ ،ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻤﻦُ ،ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢِ.
57 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ »ﻻﻡ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ« ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ؛ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﺷﻤﺲ = ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ« ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ
)ـّ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
-2ﻗﺴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺃﻟْﻘَﻤﺮُ ،ﺃﻟْﻌﻠﻴﻢ ،ﺃﻟْﺨَﺒِﻴﺮُ ،ﺃﻟْﻘَﻮﻝُ ،ﺑِﺄﻟْﻤﻌﺮُﻭﻑ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ »ﻻﻡ ﻗﻤﺮﻱ« ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﻗﻤﺮ = ﻣﺎﻫﺘﺎﺏ« ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ،
ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ )ـّ( ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻗﻤﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ :
ﻋﻘﻴﻤﻪ« ﺣﺠﻚ ﻭ ﺧَﻒ »ﺇِﺑﻎِ
14 13 12 11 10 98765 321
)ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ(.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 58
(6) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺯﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ-1]
. ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ »ﺭﺍ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻤﺎﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ-ﺃ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟-ﺏ
،ﺑِﻲ ﺭ،ﻮﺍﺗَﺎﺑ ﺃَﻡِ ﺃﺭ، ﻛَﻔَﺮُﻭﺍ،ُﺮ ﺃﻷَﻧْﻬ،ﻢﻫ ﻧُﻮﺭ،ُﻴﺮﺼ ﺃَﻟْﻤ،ﺮﱠ ﺃَﺳ،ﺮْﺿَﺎﺕ ﻣ،ﺮْﻃَﺎﺱﻗ
.ﻢﺮِﻫ ﺃَﻣ، ﺃﻟﻨﱠﺎﺭ، ﺃَﻟﻨﱠﺎ ﻗَﻮﺭ،ﺮْﻟَﻜُﻢﻐْﻔﻳ
»ﻻﻡ« ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟، ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ-ﺝ
[ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ؟، ﺣﺮﻭﻑ »ﻻﻡ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ« ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ؛ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ-ﺩ
ﺑﻪ»ﺭﺍ« ﻭ »ﻻﻡ« ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ؛ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ، ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ، ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ-2
: ﺧﻂ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
59 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ:
ﻣﺪ
ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍ ،ﻣﺪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ.
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ، ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ :
» -1ﻭﺍﻭ« ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻡ.
» -2ﻳﺎ« ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ.
» -3ﺍﻟﻒ«.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ،ﻣﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ »ﻧُﻮﺣﻴﻬﺎ«
ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻨﻮﻳﻢ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ :ﻭﺍﻭ ،ﻳﺎ ،ﺍﻟﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﻢ.
ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ.
-2ﺳﻜﻮﻥ. -1ﻫﻤﺰﻩ
ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ،ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ؛ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ
)ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ،ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﻭ
ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
ﺍﻭﻻً :ﻫﻤﺰﻩ
61 ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ ) :ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(
ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ،ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ؛ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ،ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ :
-1ﻣﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ:
-2ﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ:
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ،ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ :ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛
ﻟﺬﺍ »ﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ« ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 62
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪ ،ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺁﻥ ـ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ـ
1
F2 ﺟﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻫﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﻭﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺺ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ
ﻣﺼﺤﻒ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﺪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ
ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
63 ( )ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ: ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ
(7) ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ
: ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ-1]
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ؟ ﻳﺎ« ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺪ، »ﻭﺍﻭ-ﺃ
ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ؟، ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺪ-ﺏ
ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟، ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺪ-ﺝ
. ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪ-ﺩ
[ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ؟ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪ-ﻫ
ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺪ-2
:ﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺟ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 64
ﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً :ﺳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺳﺒﺐ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ،ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ،ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ
ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ :
-1ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ
ﺃﺗُﺤﺂﺟ~ﻮﻧﱢﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﱠﺂﻣﺔُ ءﺁﻟﺌَﻦَ ﺃ -ﺃﻟﻀﱠﺂﻟﱢﻴﻦَ
~
ﻃﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻢ ﺣﻢ ﺹ ﻕ~ ﺏ-
~ ~~
~ ~
~
» :ﺃَﻟﻒ ﻻَﻡ ﻣﻴﻢ «ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ :ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ،ﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮﻱ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ،ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻣﺪ
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨَﻔّﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ،ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺶ
ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ :
ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ»ﺃَﻟﻀﱠﺂﻟﱢﻴﻦَ«
»ﺃﻟﻄﱠﺂﻣﺔُ« »ﺃَﺗُﺤﺂﺟﻮﻧﱠﻲ« ﻛﺠﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟
ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ :ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺸﺪﺩ ،ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ
ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ »ﻻﻡ« ﺩﺭ »ﺍﻟﻀّﺂﻟﻴﻦ« ﻧﻴﺰ ،ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻻﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ :
67 ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ ) :ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ(
ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ »ﻣﻴﻢ« ﺩﺭ »ﺃﻟﻄﱠﺂﻣﺔُ« ﻭ »ﺟﻴﻢ« ﻭ »ﻧﻮﻥ« ﺩﺭ
»ﺃَﺗُﺤﺂﺟﻮﻧﱠﻲ« .
-2ﻣﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ
ﻭﻓَﺘْﺢ ﻗَﺮِﻳﺐ ﺃﻟْﻤﺼﻴﺮٌ ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢ ﺃﻟْﻌﻠَﻤﻴﻦَ
ﻭﻣﺎﺗُﻌﻠﻨُﻮﻥَ ﺗَﻌﻠَﻤﻮﻥَ ﻣﺮْﺻﻮﺹ ﺃﻟْﺨُﺮُﻭﺝِ
ﻟﻠْﺄَﻧَﺎﻡِ ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻤﻦُ ﺃﻟْﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘَﺎﺏِ
ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ،ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ :
-1ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻭﻗﻒ،
ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
-2ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ،ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻒ
ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ؛ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺳﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺩ
ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ »ﺃﻟْﻌﻠَﻤﻴﻦَ ،ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻤﻦِ ﺍﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢِ ،ﻣﻠﻚ «... ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ »ﻭ ﻓَﺘْﺢ ﻗَﺮِﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺸﱢﺮِ
ﺃﻟْﻤﺮْﻣﻨﻴﻦَ«.
ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭ؛ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ »ﻣﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ« ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺒﺐ
ﻭﻗﻒ ،ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ،ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ.
ﺣﻜﻢ ﻣﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ـ ﻧﺰﺩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗُﺮﱠﺍ ـ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 68
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ )(8
] -1ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﺪ :
ﺃ -ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺒﺐ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺏ -ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ.
ﺝ -ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟
ﺩ -ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ،ﻣﺨﻔﱠﻒ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ[.
-2ﺑﻪ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﺭﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ،ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻃﻮﻝ )ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ( ﻭ
ﺗﻮﺳﻂ )ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ( .ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺼﺮ )ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ(.
69 ( )ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ: ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 70
71 ( )ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺽ: ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 72
ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻬﻢ
ﻫﻤﺰ ۀ ﻭﺻﻞ
]ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ،ﻣﺘﺤﺮّﻙ
ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ[.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ،ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ،ﺣﺮﻛﺖﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ،ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ،ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ
ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ »ﻫﻤﺰﺓ
ﻭﺻﻞ« ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ،ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻛﻼﻡ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ )ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ
ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ
ﻭﺻﻞ ﮔﻔﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ :
»ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ،ﻫﻤﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ )ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ(
ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ«.
ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ :
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 74
ﺍﻭﻻً :ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻡ.
-1ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻫﻤﺰ ﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ
ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ :
ﺃ -ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻌﻞ ،ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺇﻫﺪﻧَﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺮَﺍﻁَ ﺃﻟْﻤﺴﺘَﻘﻴﻢ .ﺇِﺭﺟﻊ ﺇِﻟَﻴﻬِﻢ .ﺇِﻛْﺸﻒ ﻋﻨﱠﺎ ﺃﻟْﻌﺬَﺍﺏ.
ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺴـﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺣﺘـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮﺍً
ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ :
(6 / )ﺹ
(63 / )ﺍﺳﺮﺍ : ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ)
(64 / )ﻧﺴﺎء
: ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ)
(34 / )ﺑﻘﺮﻩ
: ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ
(39 / )ﻗﺼﺺ
ﺿﻢ ﻫﻤﺰ ﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ-2
: ﻣﺜﻞ،ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺿﻤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺿﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ
(14 / )ﻟﻘﻤﺎﻥ
: ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ ()
(45 / )ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺕ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 76
(26 / )ﺍﺑﺮﺍﻫﻴﻢ : ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ )
(283 / )ﺑﻘﺮﻩ
( 173 / )ﺑﻘﺮﻩ : ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ)
(33 / )ﺳﺒﺎ
ﺍﺳﻢ: ًﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ
ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻞ، ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ،ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ
ﭼﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ.(ﻲ )ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻓﻲﺍﺳﺪﻲ )ﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ( ﻭ ﺳﺎﺳﻫﺎﻱ ﺧُﻤ
: ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ
ﺮَﺃَﺓ ﺇﻣ-5 ِﻦﺇﺛْﻨَﻴ -4 ﺮِﻱ ﺇﻣ-3 ﻨَﺔ ﺇﺑ-2 ﻦ ﺇﺑ-1
ﺇﺛﻨَﻨﺘﻴﻨﺖ-7 ﻢ ﺇﺳ-6
(140 / )ﺍﻧﻌﺎﻡ
77 ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ
(7 / )ﻧﻮﺡ
(14 / )ﺻﻒ
(12 / ( )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻢ : ( ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ)
(27 / )ﻗﺼﺺ
: (ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ )
(38 / )ﻣﻌﺎﺭﺝ
: ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ
(176 / )ﻧﺴﺎء
: (ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ )
(51 / )ﻧﺤﻞ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 78
: ( ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ)
(10 / )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻢ
: (ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭﻢ)ﺇﺳ
(8 / )ﻣﺰﻣﻞ
( : ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﺔ
(6 / )ﺻﻒ
(176 / )ﻧﺴﺎء ( : ( ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ)
(60 / )ﺑﻘﺮﻩ
ﺍﻳﻦ. ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ،ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ
: ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻔﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
(80 / )ﺑﻘﺮﻩ
(78 / )ﻣﺮﻳﻢ -2
ﻫﻤﺰﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﺍﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻗﻄﻊ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻼﻡ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ.
ﺍﻣﺎ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻻﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ،
ﻭﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺣﻔﺺ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ :ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪ) ﺷﺶ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ
ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ(.
1
F23 ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ،ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺶ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ :
) -ءﺍَﻟﺬﱠﻛَﺮَﻳﻦِ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﻌﺎﻡ ،ﺁﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ .144-143 :
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ،ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 80
) -ءﺍَﷲُ ﺧَﻴﺮٌ ﺃَﻣﺎ ﻳﺸْﺮِﻛُﻮﻥَ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﻤﻞ ،ﺁﻳﺔ .59 :
ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎً :ﺣﺮﻑ
ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺰﺓ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ :
-1ﻻﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ]ﻣﺜﻞ[:
***
ﻭﻗﻒ
]ﻭﻗﻒ ،ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ :ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ[.
ﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ :ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ،ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ؛ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ
ﺁﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻭﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ،ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ :
-1ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ :
_________________________________________________________________________
-1ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺬﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ﺧﻮﺩ،ﺍﺑﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺁﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻡﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻡﺳﻠﻤﻪ ـ ﺭﺿﻲﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ـ
ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ » :ﻛَﺎﻥُ ﺭﺳﻮﻝُ ﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻳﻘَﻄﱢﻊ ﻗﺮَﺍءﺗَﻪ؛ﻳﻘْﺮَﺍُ :ﺃﻟْﺤﻤﺪِﷲِ ﺭﺏ ﺃﻟْﻌﻠَﻤﻴﻦَ ﺛُﻢ ﻳﻘﻒ .ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻤﻦِ
ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺣﻴﻢِ .ﺛُﻢ ﻳﻘﻒ ﻭ ﻛَﺎﻥَ ﻳﻘْﺮَﺅُﻫﺎ ﻣﻠﻚ ﻳﻮﻡِ ﺃﻟْﺪﻳﻦ«.
83 ﻭﻗﻒ
/
ﻭﻗﻒ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﺃﻟﺪﻳﻦَ« ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ
ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠّﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-2ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ
ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻒ ،ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻗﻒ
ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ،
ﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﺭﺏ «ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ
ﻟﻔﻆ ﺟﻼﻟﻪ ﻱ »ﺍﷲ« ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ
ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭﻗﻒ
ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺼﺤﻒ )ﻗﺮﺁﻥ( ،ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺤﻒ ﻣﻠﻚ
]ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺼﺮ[ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ :
ﺝ ،ﺻﻠﻲ ،ﻗﻠﻲ ، ،ﻻ.
ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﻒ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ،ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ :
ﻁ ،ﻡ ،ﺯ ،ﺹ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 84
)ﺑﻘﺮﻩ 8 /ﻭ (9
ﻭﻗﻒ ﺑﺮ » «ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻘﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ :
» « ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ
ﻓﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ]ﻛﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ[ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ
ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ :ﻓﻼﻧﻲ ،ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﻢ :ﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ
ﻓﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ :
)ﻗﻤﺮ (6 /
85 ﻭﻗﻒ
ﻭﻗﻒ ﺑﺮ «» :ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ = » :ﭘﺲ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﻭ
ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻥ« ﺭﻭﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ(ﺍﺯ ﻛﻔﺎﺭ ،ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ »
= ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻮﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ« ،ﺭﻭﺯ
ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ » :
«؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ :ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ(ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻔﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ،
ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ » «ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﻞ »ﺗَﻮﻝﱠ = ﺭﻭﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻥ« ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ » «ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﻞ ]ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ[ :
ﻻ
ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ
ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ،ﺍﻥ« ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪﻨْﻮﺍﻥ« »ﻗﻨْﻮﺎ« »ﺻﻧْﻴ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ »ﺃﻟﺪ-1
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ،ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ
.ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻜْﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ[ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ]ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳ-2
: [ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺟﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ]ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺺ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
-
(1 / )ﻛﻬﻒ ...
(52 / )ﻳﺲ
-
ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺔ :
ﺍﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ]؛ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺍﻟﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ »ﺭﺍ« ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ »ﻳﺎ« ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻪ
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ،ﻓﺘﺤﻪ »ﺭﺍ« ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ »ﺭﺍ« ﺑﺎ
ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻒ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ[.
-5ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﺍء ﺕ )ﺗﻮﺑﻪ» ،9ﺑﺴﻢ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ« ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ،ﺑﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ »ﺃَﻋﻮﺫُ ﺑِﺎﷲِ ﻣﻦَ ﺃﻟﺸﱠﻴﻄَﺎﻥِ ﺃﻟﺮﱠﺟِﻴﻢِ« ﺍﻛﺘﻔﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﻔﺎﻝ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺳﻜﻮﺕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
_________________________________________________________________________
» -1ﻫﺎ«ﻱ ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪ ،ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﻏﺎﻳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ
ﺑﭙﻴﻮﻧﺪﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟَﻪ ،ﺑِﻪ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ،ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﻪ ،ﻋﻨَْﺪﻩ ،ﺇﻟَﻲ ﺃﻫﻠﻪ ،ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ :ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﺤﺎﻭِﺯﻩ ،ﺧَﻠَﻘَﻪ،
ﺧُﺬُﻭﻩ.
»ﻫﺎ«ﻱ ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ :
-1ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ (.
-2ﻗﺼﺮ )ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ( ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ.
ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ )ﻣﺪ ﺻﻠﻪ( ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻧﱠﻪ
ﻫﻮ ،ﺧَﻠَﻘَﻪ ﻣﻦْ ﺗُﺮَﺍﺏٍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﺰﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺣﻜﻢ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺫْﻗَﺎﻝَ ﻟَﻪ ﺭﺑﻪ ﻭ
ﺃﺳﻠﻢ.
ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ،ﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻟَﻴﻪ ﺃﻟْﻤﺼﻴﺮُ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ
ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ؛ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟَﻪ ﺃﻟﻤﻠْﻚ ،ﺧُﺬُﻭﻩ ﻓَﻌﻠﱡﻮﻩ ﺛُﻢ ... ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ.
89 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ
-6ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻼﻭﺕ ،ﮔﻔﺘﻦ » :ﺃﻋﻮﺫ ﺑﺎﷲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻄﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻴﻢ« ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﺮ
×
×
ﺍ ﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭ ۀ ﻗﺮﺁ ﻥ×
=
؛ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺧﺪﺍﻭﻧﺪ ﻋﺰّﻭﺟﻞ
ﺧﺒﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ×:
)ﻗﺪﺭ ×(1 / ×1
26F
)ﺑﻘﺮﻩ ×(185 / ×2
27F
؛ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺁﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻓﺮﻭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ ،
ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻎ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ؛ ﺳﻮﺭﺓ
ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ×.
؛ ﺷﺶﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺸﺼﺪ ) (6600ﺍﺳﺖ 3 .ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺁﻥ ،ﺳﻴﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻪ
F28
_________________________________________________________________________
1؛ »ﻣﺎ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ«.
2؛ »ﻣﺎﻩ ﺭﻣﻀﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ«.
3؛ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻛﻮﻓﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻮ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ ﺳﻠَﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻦ ﺍﺑﻲﻃﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻳﺖ »ﻓﺎﻃﻤﺔﺍﻟﺰﱡﻫﺮ« ﺷﺎﻃﺒﻲ :
ﺷﺶ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻳﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺶ ) (6236ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
91 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ
-ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻭﺣﻲ )ﻗﺮﺁﻥ( ﻛﺎﺗﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ
ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﻼ ﻣﻲﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺪﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ
ﺧﻠﻔﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺷﺪﻳﻦ )ﺍﺑﻮﺑﻜﺮ ،ﻋﻤﺮ ،ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ،ﻋﻠﻲ( ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻦ ﺍﺑﻲﺳﻔﻴﺎﻥ ـ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ـ ﺍﺯ
ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺒﺎﻥ ﻭﺣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ.
-ﺩﺭ ﻋﻬﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺨﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ )ﭘﻬﻦ( ﺷﺎﻧﻪ
ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ،ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ،ﻳﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﻲ ،ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
-ﻗﺎﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﺎﺑﻪ ـ ﺭِﺿْﻮﺍﻥُ ﺍﷲِ ﻋﻠَﻴﻬِﻢ ﺃﺟﻤﻌﻴِﻦَ ـ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :ﺃﺑﻲ ﺑﻦ
ﻛﻌﺐ ،ﺯﻳﺪ ﺑﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،ﻋﺒﺪﺍﷲ ﺑﻦ ﻣﺴﻌﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺑﻮﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺮﻱ ،ﻣﻌﺎﺫﺑﻦ ﺟﺒﻞ ،ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺃﺑﻲ
ﺣﺬﻳﻔﻪ.
-ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺼﺤﻒ ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ؛ ﺍﺑﻮﺑﻜﺮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ)ﻉ( ﺑﻮﺩ،
ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ)ﻉ( ﻭ ﻣﺼﺤﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺤﻒ ﺍﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺁﻥ
ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ.
-ﺩﺭ ﻋﻬﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ،ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ :
ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ :ﺑﻘﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺎء.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ :ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺋﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺑﻪ.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ :ﺍﺯ ﻳﻮﻧﺲ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺤﻞ.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ :ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺮﺍء ﺗﺎ ﻓﺮﻗﺎﻥ.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ :ﺍﺯ ﺷﻌﺮﺍء ﺗﺎ ﻳﺲ.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺸﻢ :ﺍﺯ ﺻﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺠﺮﺍﺕ.
ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ :ﺍﺯ ﻕ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺍ »ﺣﺰْﺏ ﻣﻔَﺼﻞْ« ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 92
-ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ،
ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺣﺠﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺷﻔﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻣﺎ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺮﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ
ﻣﺮﺗﻜﺐ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻟﻌﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ
ﻇﻠﻤﺘﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ :
»ﭼﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ،ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﻨﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ«.
-ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻳﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؛ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﭼﻬﻞ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ
ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰء ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ،ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻩ ﺁﻳﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ
ﻏﻔﻠﺖﺯﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ.
-ﻣﺴﺘﺤﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺩﻋﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ
ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻋﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﻮﻳﻨﺪ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﻋﺎ
ﻭ ﻧﺰﻭﻝ ﺭﺣﻤﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﻋﺒﺎﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ.
-ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺍُﺟﺮﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ
ﺑﻴﺎﻣﻮﺯﺩ ،ﻣﻜﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍُﺟﺮﺕ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ :ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-ﻣﺠﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ،ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺍً ﺣﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؛ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ
ﻛﺴﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺐ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ،ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ
ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻴﺰﻧﺪ .ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ(ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ :
»ﻻﺗﻤﺎﺭﻭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻟﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻴﻪ ﻛﻔﺮ« )ﻣﺴﻨﺪ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ(.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 96
ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻕ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ،ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ،ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ،ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺰﺍﺝ
ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ:
-1ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺮﻱ ،ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺪ.
-2ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻓﻜﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
-3ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻫﻲ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻝﺍﷲ)ﺹ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻨﺪ :
»ﺃﻗﺮءﻭﺍ ﺃﻟﻘﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺋﺘﻠﻔﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﻠﻮﺑﻜﻢ ...ﺍﻟﺦ«.
ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺋﺘﻼﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺩﻝ :ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺒﺎﻟﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺐ ،ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻩ ،ﺁﺛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ :ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺟﻤﻊ
ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺲ ﺳﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ ،ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺶﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ
ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ،ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻦ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﭘﺮﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﻣﻮﺭﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ
ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺳﻮﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩﺍﻳﻢ؛ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ،
ﺩﺍﻧﺶﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ :ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ،ﺩﺍﻧﺶﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ
ﻗﺮﺁﻥ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻲﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ .ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪﻭ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﺰﺩ
ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﺓ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
-1ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ.
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 100
-2ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ.
ﺍﺑﻮﻋﺎﺻﻢ
ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ
101 ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺎﺕ
)ﺳﻮﺭﻩ،ﺁﻳﻪ( ﺻﻔﺤﻪ
73 ﺍﺣﻘﺎﻑ4، ﺍﺋﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ...
76 ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻢ 12، ﺍﺑﻨﺖ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟّﺘﻲ ﺍﺣﺼﻨﺖ...
77 ﺹ 63، ﺍﺗّﺨﺬ ﻧﻬﻢ ﺳﺨﺮﻳﺎً
74 ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺕ45، ﺍﺗﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻚ
76 ﻗﺼﺺ 27، ﺍﺣﺪﻳﺎﺑﻨﺘﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻴﻦ
78 ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻔﺮﺕ ﻟﻬﻢ ﺍﻡ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻔﺮ ...ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻘﻮﻥ6،
76 ﻓﺎﻃﺮ 43، ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺒﺎﺭﺍًﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻭ...
78 ﺹ 75، ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺒﺮﺕ ﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻦ ...
77 ﺁﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ45، ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺢ
77 ﺻﺎﻓﺎﺕ 153، ﺍﺻﻄﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺎﺕ
77 ﻣﺮﻳﻢ 78، ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺐ
75 ﺍﻧﻌﺎﻡ104، ﺍﻓﺘﺮء ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ
77 ﺳﺒﺄ 8، ﺍﻓﺘﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻛﺬﺑﺎً
92 ﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﺪ82،ﻭ24 ﺍﻓﻼﻳﺘﺪﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺁﻥ
74 ﺑﻘﺮﻩ34، ﺍﻟّﺎ ﺍﺑﻠﻴﺲ ﺃﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺒﺮ
86 ﻛﻬﻒ 1، ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺪﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻧﺰﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ...
ﻓﺎﺗﺤﻪ24 7-1،ﻭ66 ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺪﺍﷲ ﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﻦ...
84 ﻧﺤﻞ32 ، ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻛﺔ...
ﺍﻧّﺎﺍﺭﺳﻠﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺣﺎًﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﻮﻣﻪ ...ﻧﻮﺡ61 28-1،ﻭ62
89 ﻗﺪﺭ1، ﺍﻧﺎ ﺍﻧﺰﻟﻨﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 102
ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ 80،82،83،87
ﺍﺑﻦ ﺟﺰﺭﻱ 10،13،96
ﺍﺑﻮﺍﻟﺨﻴﺮﻣﺤﻤﺪﺑﻦ ﺟﺰﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻓﻌﻲ 11
ﺍﺑﻮﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ ﺑﻦ ﻓﻴﺮّﻩ ﺷﺎﻃﺒﻲ 11
ﺍﺑﻮﺑﻜﺮ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ)ﻉ( 90
ﺍﺑﻮﻋﺎﺻﻢ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﺒﺪﺍﻟﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺭﻱ 9
ﺍﺑﻮ ﻋﻤﺮﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻲ 11
ﺍﺑﻮ ﻣﻮﺳﻲ ﺍﺷﻌﺮﻱ 90
ﺍﺑﻲ ﺑﻦ ﻛﻌﺐ 11،90
ﺍﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ 86
ﺍﺧﻔﺎ 12،17،28،33،42،43،47،48
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ،12،17،28،33،34،35،36،37،42،47،55،64،86
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻨّﻪ 35
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻨّﻪ 35
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ »ﻻﻡ«ﺩﺭ»ﺭﺍ« 37
ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻭ 37
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼ 26
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻝ 26
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻲ 76
ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ 75
107
ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ 34،42،47،48،86،12،17،33
ﺍﻣﺎﻟﻪ 86
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪ59،73
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪﻻﺯﻡ 64
ﺍﻫﻞ ﺍﷲ 16
ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ 96
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ 9،10،13،16،95،96،98
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 8،12
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺁﻥ 10،17،18
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ:ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 11
ﺗﺤﻔﻪ ﺍﻻﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻤﺎﻥ 12
ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻖ 54،55
ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ 78
ﺗﻔﺨﻴﻢ 53،54
ﺗﻔﺸّﻲ 27
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ 27
ﺟﺎﺑﺮﺗﺮﻣﺬﻱ 15
ﺟﺒﺮﻳﻞ 10،14
ﺟﺰء 90،93
ﺟﻮﻑ 19
ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪ60،64،65
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ]ﺭﺧﺎﻭﺕ[ 26
ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ 108
ﻓﻌﻞ 73
ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺳﺪﺍﺳﻲ 75
ﻗﺼﺮ 60،86
ﻗﻠﺐ 17،33،42
ﻗﻠﺐ ﻣﺪﻣﺘﺼﻞ 12
ﻗﻠﻘﻠﻪ 27
ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ 8
ﻛﻨﺎﻳﻪ 86
ﻟﺐ 22
ﻻﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ 79
ﻻﻡ ﺯﺍﻳﺪ 79
ﻻﻡ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ 55
ﻻﻡ ﻗﻤﺮﻱ 55
ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪ 37
ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺲ 37
ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ 37
ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ 37
ﻣﺜﻘّﻞ 64
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﺪ 11
ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ 19
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺑﺎ« 19
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ »ﺟﻴﻢ « 19
111
ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ